{"title":"Ravenna","description":"\u003cp class=\"whitespace-normal break-words\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo pallet trucks and trolleys\u003c\/strong\u003e offer robust solutions for professional handling. The range includes \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo hand pallet trucks\u003c\/strong\u003e , \u003cstrong\u003especialized trolleys\u003c\/strong\u003e , and a wide selection of original spare parts and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"whitespace-normal break-words\"\u003e From the \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo Quick Lift\u003c\/strong\u003e series to specialized models for slabs, each product guarantees reliability and durability. \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e , complete frames, and professional lifts are available for every industrial handling need.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"attrezzature-igieniche-ravendo-clm-ws","title":"Ravendo CLM WS Multipurpose Cart - Mobile Wash Station with Sink + Faucet, 250 kg Capacity, Steel Frame, 5-Year Warranty","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM WS multi-purpose trolley is a mobile hand hygiene washing station for professional environments. It offers a load capacity of 250 kg, overall dimensions of 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm, and a net weight of 20 kg. It features a Ø 30 mm powder-coated tubular steel frame, Ø 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims, and Ø 30 mm plastic handles. Equipped with an integrated sink and faucet for quick access to a mobile washing station. Suitable for construction sites, farms, livestock farms, outdoor events, trade fairs, public spaces, and workshops without access to fixed sanitary facilities. Manufactured in Denmark, with a 5-year Ravendo warranty. Distributed in Italy by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct Type:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mobile Washing Station\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax Load Capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 30 mm powder-coated tubular steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWheels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Pneumatic Ø 3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded Accessories:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sink + faucet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrigin and Warranty:\u003c\/strong\u003e Denmark, 5-year warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 20 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the CLM WS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM WS is a mobile washing station on a trolley that brings water and a sink wherever needed, without the need for fixed plumbing connections. Typical application: environments where hand hygiene is mandatory but there is no access to fixed sanitary facilities, such as construction sites, farms, livestock farms, trade fairs, outdoor events, and temporary setups. Feature of the WS model: integrated sink and faucet with connection to an external water source (e.g., portable tank, temporary grid connection, mobile hydrant). A more economical solution than the WS-P model, suitable for contexts with access to a water source near the workplace. Ø 30 mm powder-coated tubular steel frame and Ø 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels for easy movement even on uneven terrain. Manufactured in Denmark by Ravendo with a 5-year warranty, a key feature for professional environments where the equipment's durability justifies a higher investment compared to economical non-European solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM multi-purpose trolley range includes 2 models for mobile hygiene: CLM WS (washing station with sink + faucet, connection to external water source) and CLM WS-P (complete version with foot pump + 2 x 25L tanks for clean and waste water, autonomous system). Both share the same basic structure: Ø 30 mm powder-coated tubular steel, 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels, dimensions 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm, load capacity 250 kg.\n\nThe WS model is the economical basic version: integrated sink and faucet with connection to an external water source. Suitable for contexts with access to a portable tank, temporary grid connection, mobile hydrant. For completely isolated contexts (remote construction sites, trade fairs, outdoor events) the WS-P model with integrated pump and double tank is the correct autonomous choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). The Ravendo CLM WS is supplied assembled, weighing 20 kg, dimensions 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm. Original Ravendo spare parts (pneumatic wheels, handles, pump, tanks) available from Krollit with shipping in 3-5 business days. 5-year Ravendo warranty managed directly by Krollit for the Italian market. Italian customer support available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the CLM WS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction site with access to tank\/hydrant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEconomical solution for mobile hygiene with connection to an external water source. Robust steel frame for prolonged use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with hygiene regulations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMobile washing station for optimal positioning relative to the workplace. 5-year Ravendo warranty, manufactured in Denmark.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTemporary setups with running water\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolution for trade fairs, events, demonstrations with access to a water point nearby. More economical than the WS-P model with an autonomous pump.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e completely isolated contexts without access to a water source (the WS-P model with a double tank is correctly sized); applications with HACCP regulations requiring a closed system with controlled drainage (the WS-P model is the correct choice); corrosive environments without adequate protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGeneral features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMulti-purpose trolley \/ washing station\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTubular Diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow with red handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal Dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 × 520 × 1,120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWheels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSink\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated sink + faucet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater Connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal water source\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrigin and warranty\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition on Delivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRavendo CLM WS multi-purpose trolley assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated sink and faucet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic red handles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting kit (if required)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the CLM WS compliant with HACCP regulations for food environments?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHACCP compliance depends on the specific application. The product is made of easily sanitizable powder-coated steel, but full HACCP compliance requires evaluation of the specific process (fresh, frozen, processed foods) and combination with disinfectant soap and documented procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor professional food environments, it is recommended to consult a qualified HACCP consultant to validate the complete system (trolley + cleaning procedure + accessory devices). The WS-P model with a double tank (clean water \/ waste) is preferred for HACCP over the WS model because the closed system prevents spills on the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow robust are the pneumatic wheels on rough terrain?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 3.00 × 4\/4 wheels with steel rims are dimensioned for mixed terrain: construction sites, lawns, dirt roads, asphalt, concrete. For very rough terrain or sharp stones, it is recommended to avoid or proceed with care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard pneumatic tires typically last 2-3 years in daily professional use. For construction sites with abrasive materials (nails, metal fragments), the risk of punctures is significant: consider purchasing a stock of inner tubes or complete spare wheels. Original Ravendo spare wheels available from Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the practical difference between CLM WS and CLM WS-P?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCLM WS: sink + faucet with connection to an external water source (tank, connection, hydrant). More economical, requires running water available nearby. CLM WS-P: same trolley + foot pump + 2 x 25L tanks (clean water + waste). Completely autonomous system, more expensive but usable anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePurchase decision: WS for environments with access to running water nearby (workshops, indoor trade fairs, events with connections); WS-P for completely isolated environments (remote construction sites, outdoor events, farms without running water). For mixed use (sometimes with water, sometimes without), the WS-P is more flexible. For exclusive use with running water, the WS is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the 5-year warranty cover all components?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it covers structural components (frame, wheels, sink, tanks). Wear and tear components (handles, wheel tires, foot pump for intensive use) are excluded. Standard exclusions also include damage from improper use, undeclared corrosive environments, unauthorized modifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarranty management in Italy is handled directly by Krollit as a Ravendo distributor: in case of need, contact Krollit customer service to activate the warranty, providing the product serial number and purchase documentation. Average intervention times for warranty repairs: 2-4 weeks for parts available in stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the Ravendo product arrive already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The CLM WS is supplied fully assembled and ready for use. Only filling the tanks (for the WS-P model) or connecting to the external water source (for the WS model) requires a few minutes of initial setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e'Assembled on delivery' is a distinctive Ravendo feature for professional use: the operator does not have to spend time on assembly before first use. For international shipping, the product is delivered on a standard pallet with adequate protection. Krollit manages shipping in Italy with standard carriers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693611749704,"sku":"142751","price":324.11,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_multiuso_Ravendo_CLM_WS_Stazione_lavaggio_mobile_in_acciaio.png?v=1761320136"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-clm-ws-p","title":"Ravendo CLM WS-P Multipurpose Trolley - autonomous mobile washing station with foot pump, 2 x 25L tanks (clean water + waste), 250 kg capacity, 5 year warranty","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM WS-P multipurpose trolley is a mobile handwashing station for professional environments. It offers a load capacity of 250 kg, overall dimensions of 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm, and a net weight of 22 kg. It features a powder-coated Ø 30 mm tubular steel frame, Ø 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims, and Ø 30 mm plastic handles. Equipped with 2 × 25-liter tanks (one for clean water, one for wastewater) and a manual foot pump for hygienic dispensing. Suitable for construction sites, farms, livestock farms, outdoor events, trade fairs, public spaces, and workshops without access to fixed sanitary facilities. Manufactured in Denmark, with a 5-year Ravendo warranty. Distributed in Italy by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct type:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mobile washing station\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum load capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Powder-coated Ø 30 mm tubular steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWheels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Pneumatic Ø 3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWater tanks:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 × 25 litres (clean water + waste water)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePump:\u003c\/strong\u003e Manual foot pump\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrigin and warranty:\u003c\/strong\u003e Denmark, 5-year warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 22 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the CLM WS-P and for what?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM WS-P is a mobile washing station on a trolley that brings water and a sink wherever needed, without the need for fixed plumbing connections. Typical application: environments where hand hygiene is mandatory but there is no access to fixed sanitary facilities, such as construction sites, farms, livestock farms, trade fairs, outdoor events, and temporary setups. A distinctive feature of the WS-P model: a manual foot pump for water dispensing (hands-free washing = superior hygiene), two separate tanks (one for clean water, one for wastewater): the closed system does not discharge onto the ground and is fully transportable to the final destination for disposal. Total capacity of 50 liters (25 + 25) sufficient for approximately 50-80 consecutive washes before refilling\/emptying. Powder-coated Ø 30 mm tubular steel frame and Ø 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels for easy movement even on rough terrain. Manufactured in Denmark by Ravendo with a 5-year warranty, a key feature for professional environments where the durability of the equipment justifies a higher investment compared to cheaper non-European solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo CLM multipurpose trolley range includes 2 models for mobile hygiene: CLM WS (washing station with sink + tap, connection to external water source) and CLM WS-P (complete version with foot pump + 2 x 25L tanks for clean and wastewater, autonomous system). Both share the same basic structure: powder-coated Ø 30 mm tubular steel, 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels, dimensions 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm, load capacity 250 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe WS-P model is the complete autonomous version: it includes a foot pump and a double tank for use without plumbing connections. Suitable for completely isolated contexts (remote construction sites, outdoor events, trade fairs) where there is no running water. Higher cost than the WS model justified by its autonomous operation. For contexts with access to a water source near the work point, the WS model is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). The Ravendo CLM WS-P is supplied assembled, weighing 22 kg, dimensions 800 × 520 × 1,120 mm. Original Ravendo spare parts (pneumatic wheels, handles, pump, tanks) are available from Krollit with shipping in 3-5 working days. The 5-year Ravendo warranty is managed directly by Krollit for the Italian market. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the CLM WS-P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIsolated construction or agricultural site\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutonomous system with double 25 + 25 L tanks: hand hygiene without the need for fixed plumbing connections. Foot pump for hands-free use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutdoor events, trade fairs, temporary setups\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransportable to final destination for disposal, pneumatic wheels for rough terrain. 5-year Ravendo warranty for professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLivestock farms, farms with HACCP regulations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolution compliant with hygiene regulations for inspections and health checks, painted steel structure easily sanitizable.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e contexts with continuous access to fixed water supply (a fixed sink is more economical and functional); applications with high water consumption (50 L total sufficient for 50-80 washes: for intensive continuous use frequent refilling is required); corrosive environments without adequate protection (painted steel is galvanized but not resistant to aggressive industrial solvents).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGeneral characteristics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMultipurpose trolley with portable sink and pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTubular diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow with red handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 × 520 × 1,120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWheels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAutonomous washing system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater tanks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 25 litres (clean water + waste water)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual foot pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSink\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePortable with wash basin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrigin and warranty\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition upon delivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRavendo CLM WS-P multipurpose trolley assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable sink with wash basin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFoot pump for water dispensing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo 25-liter water tanks (clean water + wastewater)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePneumatic wheels Ø 3.00 × 4\/4 installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic red handles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting kit (if required)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the CLM WS-P compliant with HACCP regulations for food environments?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHACCP compliance depends on the specific application. The product is made of powder-coated steel that is easily sanitizable, but full HACCP compliance requires evaluation of the specific process (fresh, frozen, processed foods) and combination with disinfectant soap and documented procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor professional food environments, it is recommended to consult a qualified HACCP consultant to validate the complete system (trolley + cleaning procedure + accessory devices). The WS-P model with double tank (clean water \/ wastewater) is preferred for HACCP over the WS model because the closed system prevents discharge to the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow robust are the pneumatic wheels on rough terrain?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 3.00 × 4\/4 wheels with steel rims are sized for mixed terrain: construction sites, lawns, dirt roads, asphalt, concrete. For very rough terrain or sharp stones, it is recommended to avoid or proceed with care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard pneumatic tires typically last 2-3 years in daily professional use. For construction sites with abrasive materials (nails, metal fragments), the risk of punctures is significant: consider purchasing a spare inner tube or complete spare wheels. Original Ravendo replacement wheels are available from Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the practical difference between CLM WS and CLM WS-P?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCLM WS: sink + tap with connection to an external water source (tank, fitting, hydrant). More economical, requires available running water nearby. CLM WS-P: same trolley + foot pump + 2 x 25L tanks (clean water + wastewater). Completely autonomous system, more expensive but usable anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePurchase decision: WS for environments with access to running water nearby (workshops, indoor trade fairs, events with connections); WS-P for completely isolated environments (remote construction sites, outdoor events, farms without running water). For mixed use (sometimes with water, sometimes without), the WS-P is more flexible. For exclusive use with running water, the WS is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the 5-year warranty cover all components?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it covers structural components (frame, wheels, sink, tanks). Components subject to wear (handles, wheel tires, foot pump for intensive use) are excluded. Standard exclusions also include damage from improper use, undeclared corrosive environments, unauthorized modifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarranty management in Italy is handled directly by Krollit as a Ravendo distributor: if necessary, contact Krollit customer service to activate the warranty, providing the product serial number and purchase documentation. Average intervention times for warranty repairs: 2-4 weeks for parts available in stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the Ravendo product arrive already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The CLM WS-P is supplied fully assembled and ready for use. Only filling the tanks (for the WS-P model) or connecting to the external water source (for the WS model) requires a few minutes of initial setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 'assembled upon delivery' status is a distinctive Ravendo feature for professional use: the operator does not have to spend time on assembly before first use. For international shipping, the product is delivered on a standard pallet with adequate protection. Krollit manages shipping in Italy with standard carriers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693618368840,"sku":"142750","price":572.99,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_multiuso_Ravendo_CLM_WS-P_con_lavandino_e_pompa_a_pedale.png?v=1761320069"},{"product_id":"attrezzature-agricole-ravendo-sbnt-400l","title":"Ravendo SBNT 400 L Hay Bale Cart – Lightweight and robust","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo SBNT 400 L Hay Bale Trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo SBNT 400 L hay bale trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for transporting round and rectangular bales weighing up to \u003cstrong\u003e400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Designed for agricultural use, it combines \u003cstrong\u003erobustness, maneuverability, and lightness\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003cbr\u003eThe powder-coated \u003cstrong\u003eØ30 mm tubular steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures long life and corrosion resistance. The \u003cstrong\u003e4.00 × 8\/4 pneumatic rubber wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e with steel rims guarantee stability even on uneven terrain.\u003cbr\u003eEquipped with \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic red plastic handles\u003c\/strong\u003e, the SBNT 400 L is easy to maneuver and perfectly balances the load for safe and effortless transport. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, it comes with a \u003cstrong\u003e5-year Ravendo warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMain features:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLoad capacity up to 400 kg\u003cbr\u003eØ30 mm tubular steel frame\u003cbr\u003e4.00 × 8\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic red plastic handles\u003cbr\u003eDimensions 2000 × 550 × 940 mm\u003cbr\u003eLightweight: only 20 kg\u003cbr\u003ePowder coating for long durability\u003cbr\u003eMade in Denmark – 5-year warranty\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSBNT 400 L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAgriculture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTubular diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 × 550 × 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.00 × 8\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearing type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlain bearing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 \/ 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm plastic, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of pieces per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembled Ravendo SBNT 400 L trolley\u003cbr\u003e4.00 × 8\/4 pneumatic wheels installed\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic red plastic handles\u003cbr\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this trolley suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series trolleys are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel body, reinforced tubular frame, large diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 200-liter body is sized for feed distribution in small and medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels vs. solid wheels (PUR\/solid): which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better cushioning on uneven and dirt terrain — ideal for stables with damaged flooring or for outdoor use. Solid wheels (PUR or solid) are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete floors where there is no risk of puncture. The choice mainly depends on the type of stable flooring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow to clean and maintain the steel body?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel body should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid corrosive acidic or strong alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To prolong the life of the body, dry it after washing or leave it in an inclined position to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the SBNT 400 delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe trolley is delivered with the body already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the package. Bernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693631738184,"sku":"144810","price":790.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_Ravendo_SBNT_400_L_per_balle_di_fieno_fino_a_400_kg.png?v=1761313073"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-fw-200-4l","title":"Ravendo FW 200-4L – Feed Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 200-4L – Feed Cart with Pneumatic Wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 200-4L\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional feed cart\u003c\/strong\u003e built to ensure stability, efficiency, and long lifespan in agricultural and livestock activities. The \u003cstrong\u003e200-liter powder-coated steel bin\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures excellent load capacity and resistance to external agents. Thanks to its \u003cstrong\u003ereinforced steel structure\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is perfect for transporting feed, cereals, hay, or agricultural materials. The \u003cstrong\u003eØ3.00 x 4\/4 pneumatic wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e with steel rims and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e guarantee smooth movement, shock absorption, and perfect stability even on uneven terrain. Equipped with an \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic arched handle\u003c\/strong\u003e, the FW 200-4L combines \u003cstrong\u003erobustness and comfort\u003c\/strong\u003e for intensive use in stables, farms, and agricultural businesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel structure, robust and corrosion-resistant\u003cbr\u003e200-liter bin, ideal for feed, cereals, and agricultural materials\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity of 400 kg, suitable for intensive use\u003cbr\u003eØ3.00 x 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eSmooth movement even on muddy or uneven surfaces\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic arched handle for a comfortable and secure grip\u003cbr\u003eBalanced weight (42 kg) for maximum stability\u003cbr\u003eDanish Ravendo production, guarantee of quality and long lifespan\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 200-4L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional Feed Cart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 x 550 x 800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBin dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 500 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBin capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo FW 200-4L cart\u003cbr\u003e200-liter steel bin mounted\u003cbr\u003ePneumatic wheels Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and safety instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this cart suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series carts are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel bin, reinforced tubular frame, large-diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 200-liter bin is sized for feed distribution in small to medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels vs. solid wheels (PUR\/solid): which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better shock absorption on uneven and unpaved terrain — ideal for stables with uneven flooring or for outdoor use. Solid wheels (PUR or solid) are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete flooring where there is no risk of punctures. The choice primarily depends on the type of stable flooring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you clean and maintain the steel bin?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel bin can be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid strong corrosive acidic or alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To prolong the life of the bin, dry it after washing or leave it tilted to allow drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 200-4L delivered assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cart is delivered with the bin already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the packaging. Bernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre assistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693656805704,"sku":"143075","price":540.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_200-4L_con_ruote_pneumatiche.png?v=1761320233"},{"product_id":"attrezzature-agricole-ravendo-fw-200-4m","title":"Feed cart Ravendo FW 200L-4M – solid wheels, robust","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 200-4M Feed Cart\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 200-4M feed cart\u003c\/strong\u003e is the most compact model in the Ravendo range, designed for daily agricultural and livestock tasks. With a \u003cstrong\u003ecapacity of 200 litres\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load of 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines \u003cstrong\u003erobustness, lightness, and practicality\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003cbr\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated steel structure\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures durability and corrosion resistance, while the \u003cstrong\u003esolid rubber wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e eliminate the risk of punctures, guaranteeing reliability even on hard and uneven surfaces.\u003cbr\u003eThanks to the \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e and balanced design, the FW 200-4M is easy to manoeuvre even when fully loaded. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e and covered by a \u003cstrong\u003e5-year warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is the ideal choice for breeders and farmers seeking a solid and durable solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKey features:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e200-litre capacity, 400 kg load\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel structure\u003cbr\u003eSolid rubber wheels 200 × 50 mm\u003cbr\u003ePlastic rims with roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eLightweight: only 33 kg\u003cbr\u003eCompact dimensions 1050 × 550 × 750 mm\u003cbr\u003eSteel handle for safe guidance\u003cbr\u003eMade in Denmark – 5-year warranty\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 200-4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAgriculture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContainer volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 litres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 × 550 × 750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBox dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 × 550 × 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 × 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearing type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of pieces per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDisassembled Ravendo FW 200-4M cart\u003cbr\u003eSet of solid wheels 200 × 50 mm with plastic rims\u003cbr\u003eSteel guide handle\u003cbr\u003eAssembly instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this cart suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series carts are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel trough, reinforced tubular frame, large-diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 200-litre trough is sized for distributing feed in small and medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic vs. Solid (PUR\/solid) wheels: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better cushioning on uneven and unpaved terrain — ideal for stables with damaged flooring or outdoor use. Solid wheels (PUR or solid) are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete flooring where there is no risk of punctures. The choice mainly depends on the type of flooring in the stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow to clean and maintain the steel trough?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel trough should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid corrosive acidic or strong alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To extend the life of the trough, dry it after washing or leave it in an inclined position to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 200L-4M delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cart is delivered with the trough already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the package. Bernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693662998856,"sku":"143025","price":450.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_200-4M_in_acciaio_giallo_da_200_L.png?v=1761320324"},{"product_id":"attrezzature-agricole-ravendo-fw-300-4l","title":"Ravendo FW 300-4L feed cart - robust and practical","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 300-4L Feed Cart\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 300-4L feed cart\u003c\/strong\u003e is a reliable and easy-to-handle solution for transporting feed, forage, or agricultural materials. With a \u003cstrong\u003ecapacity of 300 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load of 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers an excellent balance of lightness and robustness.\u003cbr\u003eMade of \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated steel\u003c\/strong\u003e, it resists impacts, corrosion, and daily wear and tear. The \u003cstrong\u003epneumatic rubber wheels with steel rims\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure stability and smooth movement on any surface.\u003cbr\u003eThanks to the \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is easy to push or pull even when fully loaded. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e and covered by a \u003cstrong\u003e5-year warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e, the FW 300-4L is a durable and safe choice for agriculture and animal husbandry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMain features:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e300 liter capacity, 400 kg load\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel frame\u003cbr\u003e3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims\u003cbr\u003eRoller bearings for smooth operation\u003cbr\u003eLightweight: 48 kg\u003cbr\u003eCompact dimensions for narrow spaces\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic steel handle\u003cbr\u003e5-year warranty – Danish production\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 300-4L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 × 650 × 890 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBox dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 × 600 × 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearing type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of pieces per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo FW 300-4L cart unassembled\u003cbr\u003eSet of 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims\u003cbr\u003eSteering handle\u003cbr\u003eAssembly instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer service in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this cart suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series carts are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel trough, reinforced tubular frame, large diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 300-liter trough is sized for feed distribution in small and medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels vs. solid wheels (PUR\/solid): which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better cushioning on uneven and unpaved terrain — ideal for stables with rough flooring or for outdoor use. Solid wheels (PUR or solid) are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete flooring where there is no risk of puncture. The choice mainly depends on the type of flooring in the stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you clean and maintain the steel trough?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel trough should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid corrosive strong acidic or alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To prolong the life of the trough, dry it after washing or leave it in an inclined position to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 300-4L delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cart is delivered with the trough already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the package. Bernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer service in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693668405576,"sku":"143175","price":535.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_300-4L_in_acciaio_giallo_da_300_L.png?v=1761320520"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-fw-300-4m","title":"Ravendo FW 300-4M – Feed cart","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 300-4M – Professional Feed Cart\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 300-4M\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional cart for transporting feed and agricultural materials\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed to ensure strength, stability, and durability. The \u003cstrong\u003e300-liter powder-coated steel tub\u003c\/strong\u003e offers high load capacity and corrosion resistance, making it ideal for stables, farms, and agricultural businesses. The \u003cstrong\u003ereinforced steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e allows it to carry \u003cstrong\u003eup to 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, maintaining perfect balance even when fully loaded. The \u003cstrong\u003esolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e, with plastic rims and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e, ensure smooth, quiet, and maintenance-free movement. The \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic arch handles\u003c\/strong\u003e allow for a comfortable grip and precise control. Made in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, the FW 300-4M combines \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo quality, efficiency, and reliability\u003c\/strong\u003e for intensive and professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel tub, robust and anti-corrosion\u003cbr\u003e300-liter capacity, ideal for transporting feed, cereals, and forage\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 400 kg, perfect for intensive use\u003cbr\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels with plastic rims and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eQuiet, stable, and maintenance-free movement\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic arch handle for comfortable and safe pushing\u003cbr\u003eWeight 39 kg, excellent balance even with heavy loads\u003cbr\u003eDanish Ravendo production, synonymous with quality and durability\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 300-4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional feed cart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e950 x 650 x 830 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 x 600 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e39 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo FW 300-4M cart\u003cbr\u003e300-liter steel tub mounted\u003cbr\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and safety instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this cart suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series carts are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel tub, reinforced tubular frame, large-diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 300-liter tub is sized for feed distribution in small to medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels vs. solid (PUR\/solid) wheels: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better shock absorption on uneven and unpaved terrain — ideal for stables with uneven flooring or for outdoor use. Solid (PUR or solid) wheels are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete floors where there is no risk of puncture. The choice mainly depends on the type of stable flooring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do I clean and maintain the steel tub?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel tub should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, then rinsed thoroughly. Avoid strong acidic or alkaline corrosive products that can damage the paintwork. To extend the life of the tub, dry it after washing or leave it tilted to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 300-4M delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cart is delivered with the tub already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the packaging. Bernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre assistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693672337736,"sku":"143125","price":442.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_300-4M_con_vasca_da_300_litri.png?v=1761320450"},{"product_id":"attrezzature-agricole-ravendo-fw-400-4l","title":"Ravendo FW 400-4L feed cart - robust and easy to handle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 400-4L feed trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 400-4L feed trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for professional agricultural use, ideal for transporting fodder, feed, and bulk materials. Made of \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated steel\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers high resistance and long-lasting durability. With a \u003cstrong\u003ecapacity of 400 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it ensures efficiency and practicality even in the most demanding tasks.\u003cbr\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003elarge pneumatic rubber tires\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure a smooth ride on uneven terrain, while the \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e facilitates steering and maneuvering. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Ravendo FW 400-4L trolley combines \u003cstrong\u003econstruction quality, stability, and reliability\u003c\/strong\u003e, with a \u003cstrong\u003e5-year warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMain features:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCapacity 400 liters and load capacity 400 kg\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel frame\u003cbr\u003e3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic tires with steel rim\u003cbr\u003eRoller bearings for smooth gliding\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic steel handle\u003cbr\u003eWeight: 55 kg\u003cbr\u003eOverall dimensions: 1250 × 650 × 890 mm\u003cbr\u003eMade in Denmark – 5-year warranty\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 400-4L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAgriculture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContainer volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 × 650 × 890 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBox dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 × 600 × 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.00 × 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearing type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller bearing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of origin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery on pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pcs\/pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition on delivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo FW 400-4L unassembled trolley\u003cbr\u003eSet of 3.00 × 4\/4 pneumatic wheels with steel rims\u003cbr\u003eSteering handle\u003cbr\u003eAssembly instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this trolley suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series trolleys are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel trough, reinforced tubular frame, large-diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 400-liter trough is sized for feed distribution in small and medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels vs. solid (PUR\/solid) wheels: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better shock absorption on uneven and unpaved terrain — ideal for stables with uneven flooring or for outdoor use. Solid (PUR or solid) wheels are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete floors where there is no risk of puncture. The choice mainly depends on the type of flooring in the stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow to clean and maintain the steel trough?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel trough should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid corrosive acidic or strong alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To extend the life of the trough, dry it after washing or leave it in an inclined position to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 400-4L delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe trolley is delivered with the trough already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the package. Bernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693676171592,"sku":"143275","price":605.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_400-4L_in_acciaio_giallo_da_400_L.png?v=1761320588"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-fw-400-4m","title":"Ravendo FW 400-4M – Feed Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 400-4M – Feed Cart\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo FW 400-4M\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional cart for transporting and distributing feed and forage\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for agricultural and livestock use. Equipped with a \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated steel tub\u003c\/strong\u003e with a capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e200 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers robustness, stability, and a long operating life. The \u003cstrong\u003ereinforced steel structure\u003c\/strong\u003e allows for a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of up to 400 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it perfect for moving feed, grains, or agricultural materials even on uneven surfaces. The \u003cstrong\u003esolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e with plastic rims and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure smooth running, quiet operation, and no maintenance. The \u003cstrong\u003ebow handles\u003c\/strong\u003e facilitate pushing and controlling the load. Ideal for \u003cstrong\u003estables, farms, and livestock facilities\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines \u003cstrong\u003eergonomics, robustness, and Danish Ravendo quality\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel frame, resistant and anti-corrosion\u003cbr\u003e200-liter tub, ideal for feed, grains, and hay\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 400 kg, suitable for professional use\u003cbr\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels with plastic rims and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eNo risk of punctures and minimal maintenance\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic bow handle for stable and comfortable pushing\u003cbr\u003eWeight 46 kg, stable and balanced even when fully loaded\u003cbr\u003eDanish Ravendo production, synonymous with quality and durability\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFW 400-4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional Feed Cart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 650 x 830 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic bow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo FW 400-4M cart\u003cbr\u003e200-liter steel tub mounted\u003cbr\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm wheels\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and safety instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer assistance available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this cart suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Ravendo FW and SBNT series carts are designed for professional agricultural and livestock use: galvanized or painted steel tub, reinforced tubular frame, large diameter wheels for uneven terrain. The 400-liter tub is sized for feed distribution in small and medium-sized stables. The Ravendo warranty covers daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003ePneumatic wheels and solid (PUR\/solid) wheels: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePneumatic wheels offer better shock absorption on uneven and dirt terrains — ideal for stables with uneven flooring or for outdoor use. Solid (PUR or solid) wheels are puncture-proof, require zero maintenance, and are preferable on smooth concrete floors where there is no risk of punctures. The choice primarily depends on the type of flooring in the stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow to clean and maintain the steel tub?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel tub should be cleaned with water and neutral detergents, rinsing thoroughly. Avoid strong corrosive acidic or alkaline products that can damage the paintwork. To prolong the life of the tub, dry it after washing or leave it in an inclined position to facilitate drainage. Promptly repair any scratches in the paintwork to prevent oxidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the FW 400-4M delivered already assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cart is delivered with the tub already mounted on the frame. The wheels may require final assembly — assembly instructions are included in the package. Bernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer assistance available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693679251784,"sku":"143225","price":532.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_mangime_Ravendo_FW_400-4M_in_acciaio.png?v=1761320657"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bu-1600-2-pp-pur","title":"Ravendo BU 1600-2 PP PUR – Wheelbarrow for manure","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 1600-2 PP PUR – Manure Wheelbarrow with Puncture-Proof Wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 1600-2 PP PUR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional agricultural wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e designed for robustness, practicality, and durability. Equipped with a \u003cstrong\u003e160-liter polypropylene (PP) tray\u003c\/strong\u003e, resistant to impact and chemicals, it offers lightness and strength ideal for agricultural and livestock use. The \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized and powder-coated steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e protects against corrosion and ensures superior stability. The \u003cstrong\u003esolid polyurethane (PUR) wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø4.00 x 8 eliminates the risk of punctures and guarantees smooth rolling even on difficult terrain. With a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003eweight of 19.6 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the BU 1600-2 PP PUR is perfect for transporting manure, compost, sand, or hay. The \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic red Ø30 mm handles\u003c\/strong\u003e offer high user comfort even during prolonged use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e160-liter polypropylene (PP) tray, light and impact-resistant\u003cbr\u003eSolid PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8, puncture-proof and silent\u003cbr\u003eGalvanized and powder-coated steel frame, anti-corrosion and durable\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 250 kg, ideal for agricultural and industrial use\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic red plastic handles Ø30 mm for a comfortable and secure grip\u003cbr\u003eLow weight (19.6 kg), easy to maneuver\u003cbr\u003ePerfect for stables, fields, farms, and professional gardening\u003cbr\u003eProduced in Denmark, a synonym for Ravendo quality and reliability\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 1600-2 PP PUR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional Manure Wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1610 x 690 x 900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1140 x 720 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene (PP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized and powder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid PUR Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Ø30 mm, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRavendo BU 1600-2 PP PUR complete wheelbarrow\u003cbr\u003e160-liter PP tray mounted\u003cbr\u003eSolid PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the polypropylene (PP) tray hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The polypropylene (PP) tray is specifically designed for transporting manure and livestock slurry. PP is chemically inert, does not absorb odors, and is easily cleaned with high-pressure water. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the tray after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, requires no maintenance, and offers good rolling on concrete surfaces. The pneumatic wheel Ø4.00 × 8 better absorbs vibrations on uneven and unpaved terrain but can puncture. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrain: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 1600-liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh when fully loaded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 1600 liters correspond to approximately 1120 kg of load. Check the maximum load capacity indicated in the provided manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693691212104,"sku":"142511","price":490.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_1600-2_PP_PUR_con_ruota_piena_antiforatura.png?v=1761313923"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bu-2001-sp","title":"Ravendo BU 2001 SP – Manure Wheelbarrow","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2001 SP – Manure Wheelbarrow with Pneumatic Wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2001 SP\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional manure wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e built to ensure strength, stability, and long-lasting durability even in the most demanding agricultural environments. The \u003cstrong\u003e200-liter powder-coated steel tray\u003c\/strong\u003e offers large capacity and solidity, while the \u003cstrong\u003eØ30 mm steel tube frame\u003c\/strong\u003e guarantees robustness and excellent load balancing. The \u003cstrong\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e with a plastic rim and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures smooth and comfortable movement even on uneven terrain. With a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003eweight of 35.8 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, this wheelbarrow combines \u003cstrong\u003estrength and maneuverability\u003c\/strong\u003e, ideal for transporting manure, sand, compost, hay, or agricultural materials. The \u003cstrong\u003eØ30 mm ergonomic red handles\u003c\/strong\u003e provide a secure grip, while the \u003cstrong\u003epowder coating\u003c\/strong\u003e protects the structure over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel tub, resistant and anticorrosive\u003cbr\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel with plastic rim and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 250 kg, perfect for agricultural and industrial loads\u003cbr\u003eØ30 mm tubular steel frame, solid and balanced\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic Ø30 mm red plastic handles for comfortable use\u003cbr\u003e200-liter capacity, ideal for stables, fields, and construction sites\u003cbr\u003eWeight 35.8 kg, stable and easy to maneuver\u003cbr\u003eRavendo product, synonymous with Danish quality and long-lasting durability\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 2001 SP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional manure wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1520 x 750 x 710 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1030 x 750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35.8 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm plastic, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow and red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRavendo BU 2001 SP wheelbarrow complete\u003cbr\u003e200-liter painted steel tray assembled\u003cbr\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the painted steel tray hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The painted steel tray is specifically designed for transporting manure and animal waste. Painted steel resists the organic solvents in manure; any scratches should be touched up to prevent oxidation. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the tray after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs. pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, requires no maintenance, and offers good maneuverability on concrete floors. The Ø4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel absorbs vibrations better on uneven and unpaved terrain but can be punctured. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrain: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 2001-liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh when fully loaded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 2001 liters correspond to approximately 1400 kg of load. Check the maximum load capacity indicated in the supplied manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693695144264,"sku":"142500","price":410.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_2001_SP_con_ruota_pneumatica.png?v=1761314095"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bu-1600-2-pp","title":"Ravendo BU 1600-2 PP – Manure Wheelbarrow","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 1600-2 PP – Manure Wheelbarrow with Pneumatic Wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 1600-2 PP\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional agricultural wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e ideal for moving \u003cstrong\u003emanure, compost, hay, and bulky agricultural materials\u003c\/strong\u003e. Made with a \u003cstrong\u003e160-liter polypropylene (PP) tub\u003c\/strong\u003e, resistant to impact and chemicals, it is supported by a \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e that ensures durability and corrosion resistance. The \u003cstrong\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e with a plastic rim and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e offers smooth gliding and stability even on uneven terrain. With a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003eweight of only 19 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the BU 1600-2 PP is perfect for daily use in stables, farms, nurseries, or gardens. The \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic red Ø30 mm plastic handles\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure a comfortable and secure grip. A \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo\u003c\/strong\u003e product, guaranteeing \u003cstrong\u003eDanish quality, reliability, and long-lasting durability\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e160-liter polypropylene (PP) tub, resistant to impact and chemicals\u003cbr\u003ePneumatic wheel Ø4.00 x 8 with plastic rim and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eGalvanized steel frame, anti-corrosion and stable\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 250 kg, perfect for agricultural and industrial use\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic red Ø30 mm plastic handles for a comfortable and secure grip\u003cbr\u003eLow weight (19 kg) for easy handling\u003cbr\u003eIdeal for agriculture, livestock farming, and professional gardening\u003cbr\u003eDanish Ravendo production, synonymous with quality and durability\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 1600-2 PP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional manure wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1610 x 690 x 900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1140 x 720 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene (PP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Ø30 mm, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo BU 1600-2 PP wheelbarrow\u003cbr\u003e160-liter PP tub mounted\u003cbr\u003ePneumatic wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the polypropylene (PP) tub hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The polypropylene (PP) tub is specifically designed for transporting manure and livestock slurry. PP is chemically inert, does not absorb odors, and is easily cleaned with high-pressure water. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the tub after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs. pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, maintenance-free, and offers good gliding on concrete floors. The Ø4.00 × 8 pneumatic wheel absorbs vibrations better on uneven and unpaved terrain but can be punctured. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrain: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 1600-liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh at full load?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 1600 liters corresponds to approximately 1120 kg of load. Check the maximum load capacity indicated in the included manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693698486600,"sku":"142510","price":470.26,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_1600-2_PP_con_vasca_in_PP_e_ruota_pneumatica.png?v=1761314203"},{"product_id":"carriola-per-letame-bu-2001-sp-pur","title":"Ravendo BU 2001 SP PUR – Manure wheelbarrow","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2001 SP PUR – Professional Manure Wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2001 SP PUR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and stable \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional manure wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for agricultural, livestock, and industrial use. Its \u003cstrong\u003e200-liter powder-coated steel tub\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures high resistance and long durability, while the \u003cstrong\u003eØ30 mm steel tube frame\u003c\/strong\u003e provides solidity and control during transport. Equipped with a \u003cstrong\u003esolid polyurethane (PUR) wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/strong\u003e, completely \u003cstrong\u003epuncture-proof\u003c\/strong\u003e and with a \u003cstrong\u003eplastic rim\u003c\/strong\u003e, it runs smoothly even on muddy or uneven surfaces. With a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e37.4 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the BU 2001 SP PUR is perfect for handling manure, sand, compost, or construction materials. Designed and produced in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines \u003cstrong\u003eergonomics, robustness, and Ravendo quality\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it ideal for daily and intensive use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePowder-coated steel tub, resistant and anti-corrosion\u003cbr\u003eSolid PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8, puncture-proof and quiet\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 250 kg, ideal for agricultural or industrial use\u003cbr\u003eØ30 mm powder-coated steel tubular frame\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic Ø30 mm red plastic handles for a secure grip\u003cbr\u003e200-liter capacity, perfect for bulky loads\u003cbr\u003eWeight 37.4 kg, stable and balanced for maneuverability\u003cbr\u003eRavendo design: Danish efficiency, long life, and operational comfort\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 2001 SP PUR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional Manure Wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall Dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1520 x 750 x 710 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub Dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1030 x 750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e37.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuantity per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel Ø30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid PUR Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm plastic, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow and red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo BU 2001 SP PUR wheelbarrow\u003cbr\u003e200-liter steel tub assembled\u003cbr\u003eSolid PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the painted steel tub hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The painted steel tub is specifically designed for transporting manure and livestock slurry. The painted steel resists organic solvents from manure; any scratches should be touched up to prevent oxidation. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the tub after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, requires no maintenance, and offers good gliding on concrete floors. The pneumatic wheel Ø4.00 × 8 absorbs vibrations better on uneven and dirt terrains but can puncture. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrains: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 2001-liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh when fully loaded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 2001 liters correspond to approximately 1400 kg of load. Check the maximum load capacity indicated in the supplied manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693701796168,"sku":"142502","price":420.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_2001_SP_PUR_con_ruota_antiforatura.png?v=1761314367"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bu-2700-pp","title":"Ravendo BU 2700 PP – Manure Wheelbarrow","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2700 PP – Manure Wheelbarrow with Pneumatic Wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2700 PP\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional agricultural wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to easily transport manure, hay, soil, and bulky materials. The \u003cstrong\u003e270-liter polypropylene (PP) pan\u003c\/strong\u003e is extremely resistant to impact, chemicals, and low temperatures, ideal for daily use on the farm or in the garden. The \u003cstrong\u003eØ40 mm galvanized steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures solidity and anti-corrosion protection, while the \u003cstrong\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e with a plastic rim and \u003cstrong\u003eroller bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e guarantees smooth running and stability on any terrain. With a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the BU 2700 PP combines \u003cstrong\u003erobustness, lightness, and Danish Ravendo quality\u003c\/strong\u003e, offering comfortable use thanks to the \u003cstrong\u003eØ30 mm ergonomic red plastic handles\u003c\/strong\u003e. Perfect for farmers, breeders, and professional gardeners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e270-liter polypropylene (PP) pan, resistant to impact and chemicals\u003cbr\u003eØ40 mm galvanized steel frame, anti-corrosion and durable\u003cbr\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel with plastic rim and roller bearings\u003cbr\u003eMaximum load capacity 250 kg, ideal for bulky loads\u003cbr\u003eØ30 mm ergonomic red plastic handles for a comfortable grip\u003cbr\u003eLow weight (24.2 kg) for easy maneuverability\u003cbr\u003eSuitable for agricultural, livestock, industrial, and gardening use\u003cbr\u003eRavendo quality and reliability, made in Denmark\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 2700 PP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional manure wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 x 850 x 900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePan dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 x 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePan capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e270 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24.2 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuantity per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePan material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene (PP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ40 mm galvanized steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm plastic, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo BU 2700 PP wheelbarrow\u003cbr\u003e270-liter PP pan mounted\u003cbr\u003eØ4.00 x 8 pneumatic wheel\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the polypropylene (PP) pan hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The polypropylene (PP) pan is specifically designed for transporting manure and livestock slurry. PP is chemically inert, does not absorb odors, and is easily cleaned with high-pressure water. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the pan after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs. pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, requires no maintenance, and offers good maneuverability on concrete surfaces. The Ø4.00 × 8 pneumatic wheel absorbs vibrations better on uneven and dirt terrains but can be punctured. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrain: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 2700-liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh when fully loaded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 2700 liters corresponds to approximately 1889 kg of load. Check the maximum capacity indicated in the provided manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693705761096,"sku":"142505","price":766.12,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_2700_PP_con_vasca_in_polipropilene.png?v=1761314456"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bu-2700-pp-pur","title":"Ravendo BU 2700 PP PUR – Manure wheelbarrow","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2700 PP PUR – Manure Wheelbarrow\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo BU 2700 PP PUR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional wheelbarrow for manure and agricultural materials\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for durability, lightness, and ease of handling. The \u003cstrong\u003epolypropylene (PP) tub\u003c\/strong\u003e with a capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e270 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e is resistant to impacts, chemical agents, and low temperatures. The \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel frame\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures protection against corrosion, while the \u003cstrong\u003esolid polyurethane (PUR) wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/strong\u003e eliminates the risk of punctures and ensures smooth rolling even on uneven terrain. With a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003e40 mm frame tube\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is ideal for agricultural, livestock, and industrial use. Equipped with \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic red plastic handles Ø30 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers a comfortable grip even with work gloves. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo quality, efficiency, and reliability\u003c\/strong\u003e for intensive daily use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePolypropylene (PP) tub resistant to impacts and chemical agents\u003cbr\u003eSolid, puncture-proof PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8, with plastic rim\u003cbr\u003eGalvanized steel frame, anti-corrosion and durable\u003cbr\u003e270 liter capacity and load capacity up to 250 kg\u003cbr\u003eRoller bearings for smooth and stable movement\u003cbr\u003eErgonomic red plastic handles Ø30 mm\u003cbr\u003e40 mm frame tube for maximum strength\u003cbr\u003eIdeal for agriculture, farming, and professional gardening\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBU 2700 PP PUR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional Manure Wheelbarrow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 x 850 x 900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub dimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 x 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e270 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24.8 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTub material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolypropylene (PP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid PUR Ø4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Ø30 mm, red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed and gray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eComplete Ravendo BU 2700 PP PUR wheelbarrow\u003cbr\u003e270 liter PP tub mounted\u003cbr\u003eSolid PUR wheel Ø4.00 x 8\u003cbr\u003eUser manual and assembly instructions\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days in the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer service in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the polypropylene (PP) tub hygienically suitable for manure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The polypropylene (PP) tub is specifically designed for transporting manure and livestock slurry. PP is chemically inert, does not absorb odors, and is easily cleaned with high-pressure water. For intensive daily use, it is recommended to rinse the tub after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSolid PUR wheel vs. pneumatic wheel: which to choose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid PUR (polyurethane) wheel is puncture-proof, requires no maintenance, and offers good rolling on concrete surfaces. The pneumatic wheel Ø4.00 × 8 absorbs vibrations better on uneven and unpaved terrain but can get punctured. For indoor use on smooth floors: PUR. For mixed indoor\/outdoor use on uneven terrain: pneumatic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eThe 2700 liter wheelbarrow: how much does it weigh when fully loaded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum capacity depends on the type of material. With conventional manure (density ~0.6–0.8 t\/m³), 2700 liters correspond to approximately 1889 kg of load. Check the maximum capacity indicated in the supplied manual and do not exceed it to avoid damage to the structure and risks to the operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer service in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693710283080,"sku":"142506","price":803.94,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carriola_per_letame_Ravendo_BU_2700_PP_PUR_con_vasca_in_polipropilene.png?v=1761314662"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-pd-150","title":"Ravendo PD 150 Flatbed Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo PD 150 is a professional platform trolley with a maximum load capacity of 150 kg and a weight of 3.4 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: Ravendo \/ Nansin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModel: PD 150\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Platform trolley (Dolly)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 600 x 400 x 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 150 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 3.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Shockproof plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø75 mm, silent and non-marking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PD 150 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLogistics warehouses, workshops, and manufacturing companies use the PD 150 for manual handling of goods, equipment, and intermediate loads between workstations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo PD 150 is part of the Ravendo platform trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PD 150 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLogistics warehouses and workshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual handling of goods and equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing companies with internal flows\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransport of intermediate loads between workstations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMoving heavy pallets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be evaluated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor standard pallets, consider hydraulic or electric pallet trucks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications outside the technical specifications declared by the manufacturer. For doubts about compatibility, contact Krollit customer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 x 400 x 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo \/ Nansin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePD 150\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlatform trolley (Dolly)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShockproof plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø75 mm, silent and non-marking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSurface with anti-slip mats and integrated handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 150-500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated loads (over 50 kg\/dm²), check the rigidity of the platform and supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the platform dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Platform dimensions\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe platform dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For standard pallet packages, platforms of at least 1,000 x 600 mm are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes. Industrial models offer total brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the wheel diameter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel diameter\" in the table: typically 100-200 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome uneven floor surfaces better (joints, cracks) and reduce pulling effort. For flat industrial floors, smaller wheels are also suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or stainless steel for food\/pharmaceutical use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is required in environments with hygiene requirements (food, pharmaceutical, medical). Check the cleanability class in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714265092424,"sku":"142645","price":98.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_pianale_Ravendo_PD_150_con_ruote_silenziose.png?v=1761228324"},{"product_id":"carriole-ravendo-bacino-superiore-galfan","title":"Ravendo – BC 1100 Wheelbarrow Upper Tray","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRavendo – Galfan® Steel Wheelbarrow Upper Pan\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRavendo upper pan\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eoriginal spare part for concrete wheelbarrows\u003c\/strong\u003e, complete with \u003cstrong\u003e2 mounting brackets\u003c\/strong\u003e, a \u003cstrong\u003ehandle\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003efasteners\u003c\/strong\u003e (screws, nuts, and washers). Made from \u003cstrong\u003ehot-dip galvanized Galfan® steel\u003c\/strong\u003e, it provides \u003cstrong\u003esuperior corrosion protection\u003c\/strong\u003e compared to traditional galvanization, thanks to the \u003cstrong\u003ezinc-aluminum alloy\u003c\/strong\u003e which ensures greater resistance to weathering and rust. With a \u003cstrong\u003ecapacity of 110 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e and dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e890 x 575 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Ravendo pan is suitable for replacing or renewing the basin of a construction or agricultural wheelbarrow, offering \u003cstrong\u003edurability, robustness, and a long operational life\u003c\/strong\u003e. Manufactured in \u003cstrong\u003eDenmark\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is synonymous with \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional quality and long-term reliability\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• Hot-dip galvanized Galfan® steel, with anti-corrosion zinc-aluminum alloy\u003cbr\u003e• Includes 2 mounting brackets, handle, and complete fastener kit\u003cbr\u003e• Superior protection against rust and wear compared to standard galvanization\u003cbr\u003e• 110-liter capacity, suitable for loads of concrete, sand, or agricultural materials\u003cbr\u003e• Dimensions compatible with most Ravendo wheelbarrows\u003cbr\u003e• Durable product, easy to clean, and suitable for intensive use\u003cbr\u003e• Ravendo Danish production, guarantee of quality and long lifespan\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheelbarrow upper pan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wheelbarrow pan replacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e890 x 575 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePan capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot-dip galvanized Galfan® (zinc-aluminum alloy)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded accessories\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mounting brackets, handle, fasteners (screws, nuts, and washers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDenmark\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• Ravendo Galfan® steel upper pan\u003cbr\u003e• 2 mounting brackets\u003cbr\u003e• Steel handle\u003cbr\u003e• Mounting screws, nuts, and washers\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this accessory compatible with my model?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease check compatibility with your machine's model before purchase. For confirmation, please contact Krollit. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDelivery times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs support available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCustomer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714533527880,"sku":"640038","price":174.75,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bacino_superiore_Ravendo_per_carriola_in_acciaio_Galfan_zincato.png?v=1761299637"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-200-l-morsetto-120-220","title":"Ravendo TW 200 L Sheet Trolley Sheet Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L Slab Trolley is a slab trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 200 kg, a platform of 415 x 430 x 300 mm, and a weight of 8 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 415 x 430 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlatform (L x W): 400 x 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 200 L Slab Trolley and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlassmakers, marble workers, and specialized laboratories use the TW 200 L Slab Trolley for the safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels with a dedicated clamp or side support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L Slab Trolley is part of the Ravendo slab trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days in the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 200 L Slab Trolley for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 200 L slab trolley is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlassworks, marble works, and slab laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops with large panel processing\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of slabs with a clamp or side support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e transporting fragile slabs beyond the declared limits (check maximum load and slab dimensions before use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e415 x 430 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlatform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 x 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClamp adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120–220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat types of slabs is it suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlass, marble, ceramic, rigid panels, and other thin and fragile materials within the declared dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the maximum thickness of the clamp or side support before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an adjustable clamp?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with a clamp typically offer 0-70 mm opening adjustment for different thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable clamp allows you to adapt the fastening to slabs of various thicknesses, maintaining safety during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is its maximum load capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor very heavy slabs, distribute the weight evenly and proceed on level surfaces to avoid oscillations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuspension or solid rubber wheels to reduce vibrations during the transport of fragile slabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwivel wheels allow for maneuvers in tight spaces typical of glassworks and marble works.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan it be disassembled for transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models have a disassemblable or foldable structure to reduce bulk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for quick-release systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714640253256,"sku":"142658","price":127.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrellino_porta_lastre_Ravendo_TW_200_L_con_morsetto_regolabile_120_220_mm.png?v=1761228435"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-200-l-morsetto-0-70","title":"Ravendo TW 200 L Sheet Trolley Sheet trolley with 0–70 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm is a professional slab trolley, with a load capacity of 200 kg, platform 415 x 280 x 300 mm, weight 6.2 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 415 x 280 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport surface (L x W): 400 x 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 6.2 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlassworks, marble workshops, and specialized laboratories use the TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm for the safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels with a dedicated clamp or side support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm is part of the Ravendo slab trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer assistance available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 200 L slab trolley with 0–70 mm is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlassworks, marble workshops and slab laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs and rigid panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops with large panel processing\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of slabs with clamp or side support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e transporting fragile slabs beyond the declared limits (check maximum load and slab dimensions before use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e415 x 280 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport surface (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 x 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.2 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClamp adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat types of slabs is it suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlass, marble, ceramic, rigid panels and other thin and fragile materials within the declared dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the maximum thickness of the clamp or side support before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an adjustable clamp?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with a clamp offer a typical 0-70 mm opening adjustment for different thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable clamp allows the fastening to be adapted to slabs of various thicknesses, maintaining safety during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor very heavy slabs, distribute the weight evenly and proceed on level flooring to avoid oscillations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShock-absorbing or solid rubber wheels to reduce vibrations during the transport of fragile slabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwivel wheels allow maneuvers in tight spaces typical of glassworks and marble workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan it be disassembled for transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models have a dismountable or foldable structure to reduce bulk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for quick-release systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714643202376,"sku":"142656","price":109.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrellino_porta_lastre_Ravendo_TW_200_L_con_morsetto_regolabile_0_70_mm.png?v=1761228771"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-200-l-morsetto","title":"Ravendo TW 200 L Sheet Trolley Sheet trolley with 60–160 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp is a professional-grade slab trolley with a load capacity of 200 kg, platform dimensions of 415 x 400 x 300 mm, and a weight of 7 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 415 x 400 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport surface (L x W): 400 x 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 7 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp and for what purpose?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlassworks, marble workshops, and specialized laboratories use the TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp for the safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels, with a dedicated clamp or side support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp is part of the Ravendo slab trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 200 L Slab Trolley with 60–160 mm clamp is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlassworks, marble workshops, and slab laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops with large panel processing\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of slabs with a clamp or side support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e transport of fragile slabs exceeding the stated limits (check maximum load and slab dimensions before use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e415 x 400 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport surface (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 x 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClamp adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60–160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich slabs is it suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlass, marble, ceramics, rigid panels, and other thin and fragile materials within the stated dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the maximum clamp or side support thickness before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an adjustable clamp?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with a clamp offer typical 0-70 mm opening adjustment for different thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable clamp allows the attachment to be adapted to slabs of various thicknesses while maintaining safety during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor very heavy slabs, distribute the weight evenly and proceed on level surfaces to avoid oscillations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShock-absorbing or solid rubber wheels to reduce vibrations during the transport of fragile slabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwivel wheels allow for maneuvers in tight spaces typical of glassworks and marble workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan it be disassembled for transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models have a disassemblable or foldable structure to reduce bulk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for quick-release systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714644087112,"sku":"142657","price":104.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrellino_porta_lastre_Ravendo_TW_200_L_con_morsetto_regolabile_60_160_mm.png?v=1761228931"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-alu-200-2-in-1-m","title":"Ravendo ALU 200 2-in-1 M Foldable Hand Truck","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo ALU 200 2-in-1 M is a foldable trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 200 kg, a platform of 460 x 220 mm, and a weight of 17.4 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 470 x 500 x 1330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 460 x 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport extension (L): 1090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad volume: 250 liters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 17.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ALU 200 2-in-1 M and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnicians, maintenance workers, and mobile businesses use the ALU 200 2-in-1 M for occasional transport of equipment and materials, with the possibility of storing it in small spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo ALU 200 2-in-1 M is part of the Ravendo range of foldable trolleys, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the ALU 200 2-in-1 M for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ALU 200 2-in-1 M is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTechnicians, maintenance workers, and mobile businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e: occasional transport of equipment and materials, storable in small spaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShops, offices, and warehouses with limited space\u003c\/strong\u003e: moderate loads in spaces that require compactness for storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous handling of heavy loads (for intensive use, consider rigid, non-foldable trolleys).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e470 x 500 x 1330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e460 x 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport extension (L)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel and aluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePuncture-proof PUR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it compress when folded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Folded dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ratio between working dimension and folded dimension determines the practicality of storage in a car or closet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it supports?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the technical data sheet: typically 80-200 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFoldable trolleys have a lower capacity than rigid models due to their locking mechanisms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre opening and closing fast?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models open in a few seconds with a lever or release button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure that the opening system is locked during use to prevent accidental closures with the load on board.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple configurations of use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome 2-in-1 models convert from a vertical trolley to a flatbed to adapt to different types of loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-functionality is useful for mobile businesses that handle goods of different shapes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is it made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically aluminum for lightness or painted steel for greater robustness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAluminum is preferable when the trolley itself needs to be lifted or transported frequently. Steel offers greater robustness for intensive use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714644382024,"sku":"145454","price":305.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_a_mano_pieghevole_Ravendo_ALU_200_2-in-1_M_multifunzione.png?v=1761210789"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-sht-200-l","title":"Ravendo SHT 200 L Sheet Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo SHT 200 L is a professional slab trolley, with a load capacity of 200 kg, platform dimensions 1600 x 600 x 800 mm, weight 14 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1600 x 600 x 800 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 14 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame material: Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SHT 200 L and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlassmakers, marble workers, and specialized workshops use the SHT 200 L for the safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels. With clamp or dedicated side support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo SHT 200 L is part of the Ravendo slab trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SHT 200 L for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SHT 200 L is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlassmakers, marble workers, and slab workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: safe transport of glass, marble, ceramic slabs, and rigid panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops processing large panels\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of slabs with a clamp or side support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e transport of fragile slabs beyond the stated limits (check maximum load and slab dimensions before use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1600 x 600 x 800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich slabs is it suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGlass, marble, ceramic, rigid panels, and other thin and fragile materials within the stated dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the maximum thickness of the clamp or side support before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an adjustable clamp?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with a clamp offer a typical adjustment of 0-70 mm opening for different thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable clamp allows the fastening to adapt to slabs of various thicknesses, maintaining safety during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it supports?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor very heavy slabs, distribute the weight evenly and proceed on level surfaces to avoid oscillations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDamped or solid rubber wheels to reduce vibrations during the transport of fragile slabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwivel wheels allow for maneuvers in tight spaces typical of glassworks and marble workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan it be disassembled for transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models have a disassemblable or foldable structure to reduce bulk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the presence of quick-release systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714645430600,"sku":"144674","price":330.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_Ravendo_SHT_200_L_con_supporto_per_lastre.png?v=1761229003"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-wtt-1000-1","title":"Ravendo WTT 1000-1 Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo WTT 1000-1 is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 200 kg, platform dimensions of 1000 x 500 x 980 mm, and a weight of 14 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1000 x 500 x 980 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 14 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Ø125 mm Tente (2 with brake)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandle: Ergonomic arched handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WTT 1000-1 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the WTT 1000-1 for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo WTT 1000-1 is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the WTT 1000-1 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WTT 1000-1 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 500 x 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ125 mm Tente (2 with brake)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat maximum load can it carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be distributed uniformly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the load platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome uneven floor surfaces better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714645725512,"sku":"144350","price":501.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_tavolo_Ravendo_WTT_1000-1_con_due_ripiani.png?v=1761227566"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-td-300-4w","title":"Ravendo TD 300-4W Transport Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TD 300-4W is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 300 kg, platform dimensions of 750 x 350 mm, and a weight of 10.6 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 755 x 460 x 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 350 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 10.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TD 300-4W and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TD 300-4W for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TD 300-4W is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TD 300-4W for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TD 300-4W is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e755 x 460 x 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for the presence of parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome unevenness in the floor better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714646348104,"sku":"142649","price":198.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TD_300-4W_antiscivolo.png?v=1761229106"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-td-300-4w-pur","title":"Ravendo TD 300-4W PUR Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TD 300-4W PUR is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 300 kg, platform dimensions 750 x 450 x 320 mm, weight 15 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 750 x 450 x 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 15 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: PUR Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame material: Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TD 300-4W PUR and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TD 300-4W PUR for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum stated load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TD 300-4W PUR is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TD 300-4W PUR for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TD 300-4W PUR is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 450 x 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePUR Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed over the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the frame material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714648641864,"sku":"142679","price":217.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TD_300-4W_PUR_antiscivolo.png?v=1761229196"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-m-hms","title":"Ravendo TW 750 M-HMS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 M-HMS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, a 750 x 500 mm platform, and a weight of 31 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 31 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panels: Wire mesh\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 M-HMS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 M-HMS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum stated load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 M-HMS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian is available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 M-HMS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 M-HMS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly less capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650149192,"sku":"144403","price":670.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_M-HMS_con_sponde_a_rete.png?v=1761229349"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-l-hws","title":"Ravendo TW 1000 L-HWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 L-HWS is a professional transport trolley, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform 1000 x 600 mm, weight 52 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1000 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 52 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 L-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics operations use the TW 1000 L-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 L-HWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer assistance available for technical documentation, product data sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TW 1000 L-HWS is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 L-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transport of intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome uneven floor surfaces better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650214728,"sku":"144552","price":781.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_L-HWS_con_sponde_alte_in_legno.png?v=1761229462"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-m-hws","title":"Ravendo TW 1000 M-HWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 M-HWS is a professional transport trolley, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform dimensions of 1000 x 600 mm, and a weight of 46 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 46 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 M-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1000 M-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 M-HWS is part of the Ravendo range of transport trolleys, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1000 M-HWS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 M-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding the capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubber, pneumatic or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650280264,"sku":"144502","price":653.27,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_M-HWS_con_sponde_alte.png?v=1761229527"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1250-l-hws","title":"Ravendo Transport Trolley TW 1250 L-HWS","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 L-HWS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform measuring 1250 x 600 mm, and a weight of 56 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 56 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1250 L-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1250 L-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the declared maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1250 L-HWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping is 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1250 L-HWS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1250 L-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650378568,"sku":"144652","price":926.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1250_L-HWS_con_sponde_alte_in_legno.png?v=1761229644"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-l-hws","title":"Ravendo TW 750 L-HWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 L-HWS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform dimensions of 750 x 500 mm, and a weight of 44 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 44 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 L-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 L-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 L-HWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 L-HWS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 L-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650575176,"sku":"144452","price":671.57,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_L-HWS_con_sponde_alte_in_legno.png?v=1761229736"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-m-hws","title":"Ravendo TW 750 M-HWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 M-HWS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform measuring 750 x 500 mm, and a weight of 38 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 38 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 M-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 M-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum stated load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 M-HWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer service available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 M-HWS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 M-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for the presence of parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels are better at overcoming uneven flooring. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650837320,"sku":"144402","price":591.05,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_M-HWS_con_sponde_alte_in_legno.png?v=1761229839"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-l-lws","title":"Ravendo TW 1000 L-LWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 L-LWS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform of 1000 x 600 mm, and a weight of 43 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1100 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 43 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 L-LWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1000 L-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum declared load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 L-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1000 L-LWS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 L-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714650902856,"sku":"144551","price":680.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_L-LWS_con_sponde_basse_in_legno.png?v=1761231531"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-m-lws","title":"Ravendo Transport Trolley TW 1000 M-LWS","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 M-LWS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform 1000 x 600 mm, weight 37 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 37 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 M-LWS and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1000 M-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the declared maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 M-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1000 M-LWS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 M-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flow\u003c\/strong\u003e: transport of intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e37 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714651918664,"sku":"144501","price":620.5,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_M-LWS_con_sponde_basse.png?v=1761231653"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1250-l-lws","title":"Ravendo TW 1250 L-LWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 L-LWS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform measuring 1250 x 600 mm, and a weight of 47 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 47 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1250 L-LWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1250 L-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1250 L-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1250 L-LWS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1250 L-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\/4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for the presence of parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not rust but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714651951432,"sku":"144651","price":770.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1250_L-LWS_con_sponde_basse_in_legno.png?v=1761231746"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-l-lws","title":"Ravendo TW 750 L-LWS Transport Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 L-LWS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform 750 x 500 mm, weight 38 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 38 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 L-LWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics operations use the TW 750 L-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 L-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TW 750 L-LWS is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 L-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubber, pneumatic or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714652115272,"sku":"144451","price":598.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_L-LWS_con_sponde_basse_in_legno.png?v=1761227663"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-m-hms","title":"Ravendo Transport Cart TW 1000 M-HMS","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 M-HMS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform of 1000 x 600 mm, and a weight of 35 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad platform (L x W): 1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 35 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panels: Wire mesh\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 M-HMS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1000 M-HMS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum stated load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1000 M-HMS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1000 M-HMS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 M-HMS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the load platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome uneven floor surfaces better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714655326536,"sku":"144503","price":745.77,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_M-HMS_con_sponde_in_rete.png?v=1761231835"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-l-hms","title":"Ravendo TW 750 L-HMS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 L-HMS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform of 750 x 500 mm, and a weight of 36 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 36 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panels: Wire mesh\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 L-HMS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 L-HMS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 L-HMS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 L-HMS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 L-HMS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 500 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for the presence of parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714655555912,"sku":"144453","price":704.53,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_L-HMS_con_sponde_in_rete.png?v=1761231944"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1000-leps","title":"Ravendo TW 1000 LEPS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 LEPS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform measuring 1200 x 600 mm, and a weight of 47 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1200 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1200 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 47 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1000 LEPS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1000 LEPS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1000 LEPS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TW 1000 LEPS is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1000 LEPS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for the presence of parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels overcome floor unevenness better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714655654216,"sku":"144559","price":680.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1000_LEPS_con_ruote_pneumatiche.png?v=1761232078"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1250-leps","title":"Ravendo TW 1250 LEPS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 LEPS is a professional transport trolley, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform dimensions of 1250 x 600 mm, and a weight of 57 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 57 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Pneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1250 LEPS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1250 LEPS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum stated load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 LEPS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1250 LEPS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1250 LEPS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 x 1020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic Ø3.00 x 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714657915208,"sku":"144659","price":805.76,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1250_LEPS_con_ruote_pneumatiche.png?v=1761232184"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1250-m-hws","title":"Ravendo TW 1250 M-HWS Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 M-HWS is a professional transport trolley, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform 1250 x 600 mm, weight 50 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1350 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1250 M-HWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics businesses use the TW 1250 M-HWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 M-HWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1250 M-HWS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1250 M-HWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding the capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1350 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or sloped floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714658341192,"sku":"144602","price":767.33,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1250_M-HWS_con_sponde_alte_in_legno.png?v=1761232291"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-1250-m-lws","title":"Ravendo TW 1250 M-LWS Transport Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 1250 M-LWS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform of 1250 x 600 mm, and a weight of 41 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1350 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide panel height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 41 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 1250 M-LWS and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 1250 M-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth surfaces, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 1250 M-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 1250 M-LWS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 1250 M-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1350 x 600 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide panel height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e41 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic bow handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo the wheels have brakes?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 braked wheels for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubber, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is light and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714658701640,"sku":"144601","price":703.27,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_1250_M-LWS_con_sponde_in_legno.png?v=1761232376"},{"product_id":"carrelli-da-trasporto-ravendo-tw-750-meps-sponde-acciaio","title":"Transport trolley Ravendo TW 750 LEPS","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 LEPS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, a platform of 750 x 500 mm, and a weight of 27 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 970 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 27 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandle: Ergonomic arched handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 LEPS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 LEPS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 LEPS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit is an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 LEPS for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 LEPS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed uniformly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven floor surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714659029320,"sku":"144459","price":650.32,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_LEPS_in_acciaio.png?v=1761233232"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-meps","title":"Ravendo TW 750 MEPS Transport Cart","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 MEPS is a transport trolley for professional use, with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform 750 x 500 mm, weight 27 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 970 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 27 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandle: Ergonomic arched\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 MEPS and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops and logistics operations use the TW 750 MEPS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 MEPS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days in the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit is an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TW 750 MEPS for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 MEPS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics activities\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding the capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 x 500 x 940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven floor surfaces better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714659324232,"sku":"144409","price":670.91,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_MEPS_con_sponde_in_acciaio.png?v=1761233606"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-heavy-whtp-300-wb","title":"Ravendo Heavy WHTP 300 WB Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo Heavy WHTP 300 WB is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 300 kg, a platform size of 900 x 600 mm, and a weight of 16.8 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 895 x 595 x 970 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad platform (L x W): 900 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 16.8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame material: Steel and plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Heavy WHTP 300 WB and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the Heavy WHTP 300 WB for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the stated maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo Heavy WHTP 300 WB is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Heavy WHTP 300 WB for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Heavy WHTP 300 WB is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transport of intermediate loads between workstations up to the stated limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e895 x 595 x 970 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16.8 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the load platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubber, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels better overcome uneven surfaces. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714659717448,"sku":"144665","price":391.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_Heavy_WHTP_300_WB_con_freni_integrati.png?v=1761233721"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-light-whtp-150-wb","title":"Ravendo Light WHTP 150 WB Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo Light WHTP 150 WB is a professional transport trolley, with a load capacity of 150 kg, platform dimensions of 720 x 460 x 930 mm, and a weight of 7.2 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 720 x 460 x 930 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 150 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 7.2 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: High-strength plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrakes: Integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Light WHTP 150 WB and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the Light WHTP 150 WB for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the declared maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo Light WHTP 150 WB is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Light WHTP 150 WB is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Light WHTP 150 WB is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding the capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 x 460 x 930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.2 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-strength plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be distributed evenly on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for safe parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or non-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not rust but has a slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714660110664,"sku":"144663","price":240.95,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_da_trasporto_Ravendo_Light_WHTP_150_WB_con_freni.png?v=1761233949"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-tw-750-m-lws","title":"Ravendo Transport Trolley TW 750 M-LWS","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TW 750 M-LWS is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 400 kg, platform dimensions of 750 x 500 mm, and a weight of 31.4 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 860 x 510 x 1010 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 750 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide height: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 31.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø 200 x 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TW 750 M-LWS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the TW 750 M-LWS for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the declared maximum load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TW 750 M-LWS is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TW 750 M-LWS is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TW 750 M-LWS is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier loads, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 x 510 x 1010 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø 200 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arch handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed on the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical data sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not rust but has slightly lower capacity for the same cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714660372808,"sku":"144401","price":583.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_di_trasporto_Ravendo_TW_750_M-LWS_con_sponde_in_legno.png?v=1761234018"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-pbt-2200","title":"Ravendo PBT 2200 Transport Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo PBT 2200 is a professional transport trolley with a load capacity of 1200 kg, a 2200 x 700 mm platform, and a weight of 180 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 2200 x 700 x 590 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoading platform (L x W): 2200 x 700 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 1200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 180 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels: Solid Ø 4.00 x 8\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub Ø \/ L: 20 mm \/ 85 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PBT 2200 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations use the PBT 2200 for manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring, up to the maximum declared load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo PBT 2200 is part of the Ravendo transport trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PBT 2200 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PBT 2200 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarehouses, workshops, and logistics operations\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of goods and equipment on smooth flooring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompanies with internal material flows\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting intermediate loads between workstations up to the declared limit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e loads exceeding capacity or use on stairs (for heavier weights, consider heavy-duty trolleys or pallet trucks).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2200 x 700 x 590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading platform (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2200 x 700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Ø 4.00 x 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHub Ø \/ L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm \/ 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic arched handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the product technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load should be evenly distributed over the platform. For concentrated point loads, reduce the nominal value by 20-30% for a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the loading platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Loading platform\" or \"Dimensions\" in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For bulky packages, an extended platform or modular platforms are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels braked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wheels does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Wheel type\" in the table: solid non-marking, rubberized, pneumatic, or anti-slip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger wheels handle uneven flooring better. Non-marking wheels are suitable for delicate floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the structure made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is more robust but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714661650760,"sku":"144220","price":2780.6,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_bancali_Ravendo_PBT_2200_con_ruote_solide.png?v=1761296939"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-twse-1500","title":"Ravendo TWSE 1500 Heavy-Duty Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TWSE 1500 is a heavy-duty trolley for professional use, with a platform measuring 1500 x 700 x 300 mm and weighing 19.5 kg. Krollit has been an official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 1500 x 700 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 19.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of side panels: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Ravendo TW 1500 Series\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Steel and wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrigin: Denmark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TWSE 1500 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndustrial warehouses, heavy workshops, and construction sites use the TWSE 1500 for handling bulky and heavy loads, thanks to its reinforced frame and large diameter wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TWSE 1500 is part of Ravendo's range of heavy-duty trolleys, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels. To choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit's warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TWSE 1500 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TWSE 1500 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial warehouses and heavy workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of bulky and heavy loads up to the stated capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: transportation of machinery, crates, profiles, and industrial materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e handling full pallets (dedicated hydraulic or electric pallet trucks are needed for pallets).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1500 x 700 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of side panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo TW 1500 Series\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel and wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load Capacity\" in the technical table: typically from 500 to 2000 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor loads close to the limit, verify weight distribution and stability on even surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of wheels does it have for heavy loads?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically large-diameter polyurethane or solid rubber wheels with reinforced bearings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWheels with ball bearings support high loads with reduced pulling effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the structure made of steel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, painted steel frame of adequate section for the nominal load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models have reinforced welds and anti-corrosion finish for intensive use in workshops or warehouses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre side panels or accessories available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models accept side panel sets for containing loose or stackable goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the availability of compatible accessories in the Krollit catalog before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the delivery times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy) for industrial size items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarge trolleys may require a full truckload or reinforced pallet. Krollit manages logistics directly with the courier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714662109512,"sku":"640130","price":517.29,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_carichi_pesanti_Ravendo_TWSE_1500_con_sponde_in_acciaio_e_legno.png?v=1761234160"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-twse-2000","title":"Ravendo TWSE 2000 Heavy-Duty Trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo TWSE 2000 is a heavy-duty trolley for professional use, with a platform measuring 2000 x 1000 x 300 mm, weighing 25 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H): 2000 x 1000 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 25 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of sides: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Ravendo TW 2000 Series\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Steel and wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrigin: Denmark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TWSE 2000 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndustrial warehouses, heavy workshops and construction sites use the TWSE 2000 for handling bulky and heavy loads, featuring a reinforced frame and large-diameter wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TWSE 2000 is part of the Ravendo heavy-duty trolley range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare part order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TWSE 2000 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TWSE 2000 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial warehouses and heavy workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling of bulky and heavy loads up to the declared capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: transport of machinery, crates, profiles, and industrial materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e handling of full pallets (dedicated hydraulic or electric pallet trucks are needed for pallets).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 1000 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of sides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo TW 2000 Series\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel and wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the technical table: typically from 500 to 2000 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor loads close to the limit, check weight distribution and stability on even surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat wheels does it have for heavy loads?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically large-diameter wheels made of polyurethane or solid rubber with reinforced bearings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWheels with ball bearings support high loads with low pulling effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the structure made of steel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, painted steel frame of adequate section for the nominal load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models have reinforced welds and anti-corrosion finish for intensive use in workshops or warehouses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre sides or accessories available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models accept side board sets for containing bulk or stackable goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the availability of compatible accessories in the Krollit catalog before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the delivery times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy) for industrial size items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarge trolleys may require a truckload or reinforced pallet. Krollit manages logistics directly with the courier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714662207816,"sku":"640131","price":708.44,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_per_carichi_pesanti_Ravendo_TWSE_2000_con_sponde_in_acciaio_e_legno.png?v=1761234359"},{"product_id":"carrelli-ravendo-twse-mini","title":"Ravendo TWSE-MINI Heavy Duty Sack Truck","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TWSE-MINI is a heavy-duty trolley for professional use, weighing 17 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (L x H): 1500 x 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 17 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of sides: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Ravendo TW MINI Series\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrigin: Denmark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TWSE-MINI and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndustrial warehouses, heavy workshops, and construction sites use the TWSE-MINI for handling bulky and heavy loads, featuring a reinforced frame and large-diameter wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ravendo TWSE-MINI is part of Ravendo's range of heavy-duty trolleys, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TWSE-MINI for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TWSE-MINI is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial warehouses and heavy workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: handling bulky and heavy loads up to the declared capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: transporting machinery, crates, profiles, and industrial materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e handling full pallets (dedicated hydraulic or electric pallet trucks are needed for pallets).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions (L x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1500 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of sides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRavendo TW MINI Series\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the technical table: typically from 500 to 2000 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor loads close to the limit, check weight distribution and stability on regular floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat wheels does it use for heavy loads?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically large-diameter wheels made of polyurethane or solid rubber with reinforced bearings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWheels with ball bearings support high loads with low pulling effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the structure made of steel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, painted steel frame of suitable section for the nominal load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models have reinforced welds and anti-corrosion finish for intensive use in workshops or warehouses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre sides or accessories available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models accept side board sets for containing loose or stackable goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the availability of compatible accessories in the Krollit catalog before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the delivery times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy) for industrial-sized items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarge trolleys may require a truckload or reinforced pallet. Krollit manages logistics directly with the courier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714662699336,"sku":"640230","price":602.7,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_Ravendo_TWSE-MINI_con_4_sponde_laterali_in_acciaio.png?v=1761234477"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/collections\/logo_ravendo_150x150_5124f9f6-d11c-4294-8cfe-398f530ae63e.png?v=1756736917","url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/ravendo.oembed","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}